2009 AVENGER
AVENGER
Chrysler LLC
81-226-0930
First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2009
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution there-
fore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................83
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 171
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................263
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................347
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................365
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................421
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................439
10
INDEX
....................................................................449
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................ 15
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ............. 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 ........................... 15
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Sentry Key威 Programming ............... 17
▫ General Information .................... 18
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . 19
▫ Rearming The System .................. 19
▫ To Arm The System .................... 19
▫ To Disarm The System .................. 20
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped ...... 21
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped .... 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors ................... 22
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 24
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk .................. 25
2
▫ Using The Express Down Windows Feature
— If Equipped........................ 26
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 26
▫ Programming Additional RKE Transmitters . . . 26
▫ Battery Replacement ................... 26
▫ General Information .................... 27
䡵 Remote Start System — If Equipped ......... 28
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 29
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 31
▫ Manual Door Locks .................... 31
▫ Power Door Locks ..................... 32
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) ............................. 34
䡵 Power Windows ........................ 35
▫ Power Window Switches ................ 35
▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped ........ 36
▫ Auto Window Up — If Equipped .......... 37
▫ Reset Auto Up ....................... 37
▫ Window Lockout Switch ................ 38
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 38
䡵 Trunk Release ......................... 39
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning .................... 39
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release .......... 40
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 41
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 43
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Seat Belts ....................... 49
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners .................. 49
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert威).......................... 49
▫ BeltAlert威 Programming................. 50
▫ Automatic Locking Mode ................ 51
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ........... 51
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 51
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
Airbag ............................. 52
▫ Airbag System Components .............. 53
▫ Front Seat Airbag Features ............... 54
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls .... 60
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 66
▫ Child Restraints ....................... 68
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 79
䡵 Safety Tips ............................ 80
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 80
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 80
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .................... 81
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
NOTE:
•
If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-
rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this
occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove
the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the
system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop-
erable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the
key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. For details, refer
to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
•
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
•
With either front door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Key-
less Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
Locking Doors With The Key
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is
located in the driver’s door only.
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, refer to “Body
Lubrication” under “Maintenance Procedures” in Sec-
tion 7 of this manual.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the Vehicle Security Light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle
Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil SpeedPass™, additional Sentry Keys威,
or any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other Radio Frequency
(RF) electronics will not cause interference with this
system.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Sentry Key姞 Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following proce-
dure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an autho-
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the doors
and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for
unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes, the horn
will sound intermittently and the headlights, park lights,
taillights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash.
Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
Rearming The System:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after three
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
To Arm The System:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
open or closed), and close all doors.
NOTE: The system will not arm if you lock the doors
with the manual door lock plungers.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the
system is arming. During this period, if a door is opened,
the ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks
are unlocked in any manner, the system will automati-
cally disarm. After 16 seconds, the indicator light will
flash slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
NOTE:
•
During the 16 second arming period, if a door is
opened or the ignition switch is turned ON, the system
will automatically disarm.
•
Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm system dis-
ables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel
and passenger door trim panel, the trunk release
button on the instrument panel, and the HomeLink威/
Garage Door Opener (if equipped).
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system.
•
The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
ing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected the system will remain
armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the system.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times
(instead of the normal twice), and the horn will chirp
three times, when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE
transmitter to alert the driver.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy/reading lights will turn on when you use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open
either door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if so
equipped). For details, refer to “Illumination Approach,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
The interior lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
•
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, lower both front windows (if equipped), or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances a maximum of
66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
•
The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
•
Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual
for details.
Vehicle Key
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm system. Opening a door with the
system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm system.
Flash Lights With Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with
Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual
for details.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm system. Opening a door with the system
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm
system.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Illuminated
Approach,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features), under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn with Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Sound
Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with
the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
To Unlatch the Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times to unlatch the trunk.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Using the Express Down Windows Feature — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if
equipped) will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional RKE Transmitters
Refer to “Sentry Key威 Programming” under “Sentry
Key威” in this section.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of batteries is five years.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside
the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter while maintaining security. The system has a
targeted range of up to 328 ft (100 m). The vehicle must
be locked, the deck lid and hood closed and the shift
lever in PARK in order to start the engine using the
Remote Start button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Remote start requires automatic transaxle
equipped vehicles.
Remote Start Button
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Trunk closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice. The engine will
start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
•
For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the
Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, within 15 minutes, insert the key into
the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON
position. Then, insert the key into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to the ON position, otherwise the engine
will shut off at the end of 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Lock Plunger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, your door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Power Door Lock Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission shift lever was in gear and the
vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock
the doors.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
The Child Protection Door Locks (Rear Doors) are located
inside the rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the
ignition key or similar flat-bladed object into the lock and
rotate approximately one–quarter turn to the LOCK or
UNLOCK position (as indicated by the stamped icons).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Protection Door
Locks are engaged.
Child Lock Control
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches
that give you fingertip control of all four power win-
dows.
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel, which operates the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, and when
the accessory delay feature is active.
AUTO Power Window Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To cancel the Auto Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), the power window switches will
remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned off. Opening either door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Key-Off power Delay” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Window Up — If Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE: ANTI-PINCH PROTECTION
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
When the window is almost closed, there is no
anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
Reset Auto Up
Any time the vehicle battery goes dead, the Auto Up
function will be disabled. To reactivate the Auto Up
feature, pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCK button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Window Lockout Switch
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK RELEASE
From inside the car the trunk lid
can be released by depressing the
TRUNK RELEASE button located
on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this switch
to operate.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press
and release the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter two times.
With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will display in
place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed or if the trip button is depressed.
With the key in the LOCK position or with the key out,
the word “deck” will display until the trunk is closed.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will display.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. The following safety
features are standard on all vehicles:
•
Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts
•
Advanced multistage driver and new active-vent front
passenger airbags
•
New active-vent front passenger airbags.
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
An energy absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
that span the front and second rows for sedans (if
equipped)
•
Supplemental seat side (Thorax) airbags
•
Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event.
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. Refer
to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in
this section.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce
your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out.
WARNING!
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out the Latch Plate
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
WARNING!
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Positioning the Lap Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and
have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward
or downward to position the belt away from your neck.
Push ANCHORAGE button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Belts
The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three point belts
are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen-
gers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear
shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
In addition, the front passenger seat belt includes a
two-stage load-limiting feature to enhance occupant pro-
tection for the same reason.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) (see Airbag section). Like the
front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After
a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and
pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞)
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will
alert the driver to buckle their seat belt. The driver
should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will
continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light
for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert姞 Programming
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially
each time when unbuckling.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode
is available on all passenger seating positions. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is
installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency)
Locking mode.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender, and stow it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle may also be equipped with side airbags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags,
they are located above the side windows. The trim
covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
(if equipped)
•
Front Seat-Mounted Side (Thorax) Airbags
•
Front Impact Sensors
•
Side Impact Sensors (if equipped)
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Seat Belt Warning Light
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Front Seat Airbag Features
The front airbag system has dual-stage driver and front
passenger airbags. This system provides output appro-
priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the impact
sensors at the front of the car.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the second stage is expended later in the crash
event.
Driver Airbag Special Features
Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by
the driver’s seat position as well as impact severity. Use
of special inflators, result in a very compact driver’s side
airbag.
In addition to the small size, the inflating gasses exit
through strategically placed vents, which direct the gas
away from the occupant.
Front Passenger Airbag Special Features
A new active venting front-passenger airbag is designed
to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of
position by the use of active vents positioned on each
side of the airbag.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Thorax Side
Airbags
Front seat-mounted side (Thorax) airbags provide en-
hanced protection and work together with supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect
an occupant during a side impact. The seat-mounted side
airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the
outboard side of the seat.
When the bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each bag deploys
independently, that is a left side impact deploys the left
bag only and a right-side impact deploys only the right
bag.
Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Airbags offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each airbag features inflated chambers
place adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that
reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The
curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on
the impact side.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the side
bags during an impact severe enough to require airbag
occupant protection.
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC). The area
where the side curtain airbag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
•
Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on
or around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags, and side
airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. However, even in collisions where the airbags
work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraints.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ in Section 9 of this
manual.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Occupant Restraint Controller System (ORC) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system required for
this vehicle.
The ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the
sensor signals, a central electronic Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) deploys the front airbags, side inflat-
able airbag curtains (if equipped), seat-mounted side
(Thorax) airbags, and front seat belt pretensioners as
required for each type of impact.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or RUN positions. These include all of the items listed
above except the steering wheel and column, instrument
panel, and passenger knee bolsters. If the key is in the
OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
first turned ON. After the self-check, the Air-
bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
Impact Sensors
Two sensors, located on the front body structure, trigger
airbag deployment in direct frontal impacts and aid the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) in determining
appropriate response to frontal impact events. Additional
sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deploy-
ment and provide deployment verification.
Side Inflatable Curtain and Front Seat-Mounted
Airbags — If Equipped
The Occupant Restraint Controller System (ORC) de-
ploys the side inflatable curtain and seat-mounted thorax
side airbags during collision with other vehicles and
during collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the vehicle — such as collisions with
poles, trees or similar objects.
It will deploy the side inflatable curtains and front seat
thorax mounted airbags only on the impact side of the
vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
The front driver and passenger seat contain inflatable
side airbags to protect the occupant from impact injuries.
Correctly functioning front passenger seat components
are critical for the Occupant Restraint Controller System
(ORC) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any
way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always
use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by Chrysler LLC/Mopar.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS-related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrysler LLC/Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with re-
quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FM-
VSS).
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine
•
Flashes hazard lights
•
Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed
•
Unlocks the doors automatically
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detect a moderate-
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
advanced airbag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap-
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during
the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
•
The light remains on after the six to eight second
interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the US government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
Data parameters that may be recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/Stability Control status
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants And Small Children
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH)” in this section.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should
use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
(Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and
are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your
child restraints:
•
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
All passenger seating positions contain automatic
locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and
pull it tight if necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
CAUTION!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat-
ing LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-
board positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child re-
straints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to
“Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint Sys-
tem” for typical installation instructions.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
1— Cover A—Tether Strap Hook
3— Attaching Strap B—Tether Anchor
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to in-
creased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALRs), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section for
details. A locking clip should not be necessary once the
automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoul-
der and lap belt on the child restraint. The Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) is activated by first attaching
the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor, then allowing the webbing to retract. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by
depressing the button, and allow the webbing to retract
into the retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that:
•
The child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Proce-
dures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
The Airbag Warning Light should come on and remain
on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the LED is not lit
during starting, have it checked. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
NOTE: If the defrost feature is not functioning, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately by an
authorized service center. The windshield could fog up
while driving and obscure your visibility.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. In addition, if
gasoline fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid,
transmission fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 87
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ..... 87
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 88
▫ Power Mirrors ........................ 89
▫ Adjusting Side View Mirrors ............. 90
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .... 90
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)—
If Equipped............................ 91
▫ Operation ........................... 93
▫ Phone Call Features ................... 101
▫ UConnect威 System Features ............. 104
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 109
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect威 System.................... 110
▫ General Information ................... 119
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) —
If Equipped........................... 119
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 119
▫ Commands ......................... 121
3
▫ Voice Training ....................... 124
䡵 Seats ............................... 124
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments .......... 124
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ............. 127
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............. 128
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat ........... 129
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints .............. 130
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 131
▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest ......... 132
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............. 132
䡵 Lights .............................. 134
▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights ............ 134
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights And Instrument
Panel Lights ........................ 135
▫ Automatic Headlight System —
If Equipped......................... 136
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................. 136
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 137
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped......................... 137
▫ Lights On Reminder .................. 137
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 137
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 138
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ....... 139
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers ........... 140
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 141
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 142
▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available
With Auto Headlights Only) ............. 142
▫ Windshield Washers ................... 142
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 143
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ...... 144
▫ To Activate ......................... 145
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed .............. 145
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 145
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 146
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 146
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ............... 147
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 147
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 148
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming ..... 151
▫ Security ........................... 152
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 152
▫ General Information ................... 153
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............. 153
▫ Sunroof Operation .................... 154
▫ Auto Sunroof Express With Anti-Pinch
Protection — If Equipped ............... 155
▫ Sunshade Operation ................... 155
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 155
▫ Sunroof Maintenance .................. 155
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 156
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 156
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped .......................... 159
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 160
▫ Heated Or Cooled Cupholder —
If Equipped......................... 160
▫ Rear Bottle Holders ................... 161
䡵 Storage ............................. 162
▫ Driver’s Side Sunglass Holder —
If Equipped......................... 162
▫ CargoArea......................... 162
䡵 Console Features ...................... 164
▫ Dual Storage Bins .................... 164
▫ Video Console — If Equipped ............ 166
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 167
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ..... 167
䡵 Beverage Cooler Storage Bin — If Equipped . . . 168
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. Push in the button on the face
of the mirror to activate the dimming feature.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
1 — Auto Dimming Mirror Power Indicator
2 — On/Off Switch
3 — Auto Dimming Mirror Sensor
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the
controls mounted on the driver’s door panel.
A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off
position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. When finished,
return the knob to the center O (OFF) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Power Mirror Switch
Mirror Directions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
Adjusting Side View Mirrors
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on your right side mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞)—
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)
system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect威 system operating instructions for these ra-
dios. Radio sales code can be located on the lower right
corner of the Radio faceplate.
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect威 system.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for
supported phones.
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
The UConnect威 system is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
UConnect威 features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
UConnect威 works no matter where you stow your cellu-
lar phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long
as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons (PHONE
Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button) that will
enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your UConnect威 system. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your UConnect威 system. The priority
allows the UConnect威 system to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
UConnect威 system will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the UConnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, UConnect威 automatically
downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
UConnect威 automatically downloads names (text names)
and number entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book Access
Profile may support this feature. See UConnect威 website
for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or UConnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the UConnect威, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the UConnect威.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the UConnect威. These can only be edited on
the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to UConnect威 on the next phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, UConnect威
allows the user to download entries from their phone via
Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the PHONE button
and say “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts,
“Ready to accept “V” card entry via Bluetooth威…” The
system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from
your phone using the Bluetooth威 Object Exchange Profile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owner’s Manual for
specific instructions on how to send these entries from
your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit UConnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙
Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the phone-
book. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
and a home number, but you can add ”John Doe’s” work
number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete UConnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” UConnect威 Phonebook Entries
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this
section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG-
NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect威 system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
UConnect姞 System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change opera-
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”’, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect威 system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect威
system.
When calling a number with your UConnect威 system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence
you wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
pound, (3746#),youcanpresstheVOICE RECOGNI-
TION button and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number,
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number on
a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the UConnect威 system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dial-
ing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect威 system:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-
OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNI-
TION button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see
the next two sections for an alternate way to “select”
or “delete” a paired phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
System
UConnect威 Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and UConnect威 Local) name
recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect威 system.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and after the beep you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Commands
The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-
tion system is speaking. Please note the volume setting
for VR is different then the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say “Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hard-
key to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one
of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, say “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will
train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
Forward/Rearward
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the floor.
Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired position.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After releasing the adjusting bar, apply forward and
rearward body pressure to be sure the seat is latched.
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If
Equipped
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in. (56 mm).
Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Reclining Bucket Seats
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback Adjustment
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the front switch to move the seat
up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The rear
switch controls the seatback recliner.
Lumbar Support
Power Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for the heated seats are located in the center
console below the climate controls. There are indicator
lights in the switches, which indicate a low heat setting
(one light lit) or high heat setting (two lights lit).
Press the switch once to choose High (two
lights), press it a second time to choose Low
(one light), press it a third time to turn the
heater Off (no lights).
Heated Seat Switches
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
releases the seatback to fold forward.
Seatback Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded
rim for retaining items stored on the seat back panel.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraints so
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower, depress the button on
the post guide and push down on the head restraint.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
Adjustable Head Restraint
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position,
be sure the seat back is latched.
WARNING!
The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Folding Rear Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with cup
holders.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
Hood Release Lever
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
in its proper location. To prevent possible damage, do not
slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn
the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the
light can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights
will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time,
so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the
vehicle. They will not turn off automatically. Interior
lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
There is a second light located midway back in the
headliner.
Interior Dome Lamp
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Headlights, Parking Lights and Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation. Turn to the third detent AUTO
headlight operation (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or
down.
Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped
Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third
detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight
system.
With the engine running and the multifunction lever in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn
off based on the surrounding light levels.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60, or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multi-
function lever must be rotated to the off position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will
illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” under “Customer-
Programmable Features” in Section 4 to turn this feature
“On/Off” or set the time interval.
Dimmer Control
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as DRL at DRL
intensity (lower), whenever the ignition is ON, the engine
is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake
is off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in any
position except PARK.
NOTE: On this vehicle, the DRL will automatically turn
off when the turn signal is in operation and automatically
turn back on when the turn signal is not operating.
Lights On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Front Fog Light Control
Turn Signal Control
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially upward or downward without moving beyond
the detent. The turn signal will automatically flash three
times, regardless of how long the lever is held.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
High Beam/Low Beam Select
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation, or to
the second detent past the intermittent settings for high
speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park
position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they
are operating. The wipers will resume operation when
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles.
For vehicles equipped with the Speed Sensitive Intermit-
tent Wiper System, the wiper delay times depend on
vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will double.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With
Auto Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the A (AUTO) position. In addition,
the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature.
The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
Mist Control
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn off.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located
on the end of the Electronic Speed Control
lever. The CRUISE indicator in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push and release the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. Be sure to turn the system
off when not in use.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system will auto-
matically turn off when the ignition is turned OFF.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press down
on the lever and release SET DECEL. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) for the Electronic Speed Control to set.
•
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pressing the lever SET DECEL.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you (CANCEL), or normal
brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate
the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning off the ignition erases the set speed from
memory.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever up and
release RESUME ACCEL, and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the lever
RESUME ACCEL. Release the lever when the desired
speed is reached, and the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the lever SET DECEL. Release
the lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
set speed will be established.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed decreases.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Don’t use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or
on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming Homelink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink威
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single Homelink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until HomeLink威
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun visors
in the Dome/Reading Lamp.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Left Interior Light 3 — ATC Sensor (If Equipped)
2 — Power Sunroof Switch 4 — Right Interior Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Sunroof Operation
Opening Sunroof Manually
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof Manually
To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
roof travel at any point.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Auto Sunroof Express With Anti-Pinch Protection
— If Equipped
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-Volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the
ignition is ON. This outlet will also operate a conven-
tional cigar lighter unit.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If desired, the instrument panel power outlet
can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide
power with the ignition switch while in the LOCK
position.
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
Console Interior
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adapter.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your autho-
rized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with the heated and cooled
cupholder, locate the cup holder ash receiver in the
forward cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter.
You may use the power outlet, located in the instrument
panel below the climate control knobs, or in the bottom of
the console compartment, for this cigar lighter.
Ash Receiver
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
CUPHOLDERS
Heated or Cooled Cupholder — If Equipped
With this feature the rear cavity of the cupholder can
keep cool beverages cool, and hot beverages hot. The rear
cup holder heats to 140°F (60°C) or cools to 35°F (1.6°C).
The switch is located on the front of the center console
and has three positions: Heat, Off or Cool.
When the unit is on and the LED is Red, the cupholder is
being heated. When the LED is Blue, the cupholder is
being cooled.
CAUTION!
Make sure the beverage container can withstand the
temperatures shown above, when using the Cooled
or Heated Cupholder.
Heated or Cooled Cupholder
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Bottle Holders
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Rear Bottle Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
STORAGE
Driver’s Side Sunglass Holder — If Equipped
An integrated sunglass holder is located in the headliner
above the sun visor. To access the sunglass holder, lower
the sun visor. Small items such as toll tickets can be
stored between the two straps, while sunglasses or other
items can be stored above the two straps.
Cargo Area
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
Sunglass Holder
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier
objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dan-
gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The center console armrest slides forward from design
position to provide added user comfort. Two cupholders,
each of which can accommodate large beverage contain-
ers. A one piece cupholder insert for both cavities can
easily be removed for cleaning. The cupholders will also
accommodate large size cups and 20 oz. (.5 L) bottles. An
optional removable ashtray may be located in the one
cupholder.
Dual Storage Bins
Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged armrest provides
access to these storage areas.
Console Features
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The left latch opens to the top storage area.
The lower bin can be accessed directly, without first
exposing the upper bin, by operating the right latch with
the armrest down.
The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items.
The lower storage bin includes a molded-in coin holder,
room for CD’s, DVD’s, and a power outlet that allows a
cell phone to recharge while concealed.
NOTE:
•
A notch in the side of the console base under the
armrest will also allow use of cell phone while still
plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest
latched down.
•
The power outlet located inside the console can also
energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker’s
Package.
Storage Console Detail
1 — Release Top Compartment
2 — Release Bottom Compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Video Console — If Equipped
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) in-
cludes the following components:
•
The screen for a rear seat DVD player is stored under
the armrest.
•
Remote Control
•
Audio/Video RCA Jacks
Refer to, “Video Entertainment System — If Equipped,”
in Section 4 of this manual, for further information.
Video Console
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The electric rear window defroster switch is lo-
cated on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side
mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illumi-
nate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after approxi-
mately 10 minutes of operation for the first push of the
button, and will turn off after approximately five minutes
for the second push of the button.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
•
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE BIN — IF
EQUIPPED
The beverage cooler storage bin is located in the top of
the instrument panel on the passenger side. A recessed
latch at the front releases the bin door and swings up for
easy access.
The cooling bin will hold up to four, standing, 12 oz
(.3 L), beverage cans. The cooler bin is also equipped with
a soft molded liner that is removable for easy cleaning.
Inside the bin is a vent which, when opened, allows
either air conditioned or fresh air to flow into the storage
bin. Depending on ambient temperature and A/C set-
ting, the bin can keep beverages cool.
For the cooler storage bin to operate properly, door must
remain closed while vehicle is in operation.
Shut off the beverage cooler when not in use, by closing
the vent inside. This will prevent cool air from entering
the passenger compartment when in heat mode.
Beverage Cooler
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The use of the beverage cooler storage bin is for
non-perishable beverages only.
The glove compartment is located beneath the beverage
bin. The glove compartment door swings downward for
easy access.
Glove Compartment Access
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ................ 174
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base ................ 175
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium ............ 176
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............ 177
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped .......................... 189
▫ EVIC Displays ....................... 190
▫ Oil Change Required .................. 191
▫ Trip Functions ....................... 192
▫ Compass Display ..................... 193
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) ........................... 196
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack) ............................... 198
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ....... 199
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 207
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ........ 209
4
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play)..................... 211
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 211
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio
(RER/REN) – If Equipped ................ 214
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 214
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)—
If Equipped......................... 214
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ................ 214
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)................ 217
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ...... 217
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play .................. 220
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 222
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 225
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio............................... 226
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ...... 226
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play .................. 232
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 234
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 237
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 237
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only)..... 238
▫ System Activation .................... 238
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 239
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode ................ 240
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 240
▫ Reception Quality .................... 240
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode .... 241
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped)........................ 243
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped)........................ 243
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —
If Equipped .......................... 244
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 246
▫ Operation With RES / REQ AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player ................. 247
▫ Operation With RER Multi-Media System . . . 248
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance .................. 249
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 249
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 250
▫ Manual Heating Ventilation And Air
Conditioning (HVAC).................. 250
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped......................... 254
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 - Air Outlet 5 - Upper Glove Compartment/Beverage
Cooler – If Equipped
9 - Power Supply
2 - Side Window Demister Outlet 6 - Lower Glove Compartment 10 - Climate Controls
3 - Instrument Cluster 7 - Heated Seat Switch — If Equipped 11 - Trunk Release Switch
4 - Radio 8 - Hazard Switch
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
located on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
4. Speedometer
Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
kilometers per hour (km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
4
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gal-
lons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a
single chime will sound.
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added.
6. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local
authorized dealer.
7. Airbag Warning Light
The light comes on and remains on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
turn on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected by an autho-
rized dealer.
8. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
that the system is armed. The light will stop
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
10. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light will come on and remain on when the
ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON
position, and the light will turn off after the engine is
started. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Shift Lever Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
shift lever selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
14. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
the reading before and after the service so that the correct
mileage can be determined.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odom-
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button”
for additional information.
Vehicle Warning Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, “door,” “deck,”
“LoW TirE,” “CHAngE OIL,” “GASCAP” or “HOTOIL”
will display in the odometer.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
“Trunk Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in this
section for specific messages).
LoW TirE
When the appropriate condition exists the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three
cycles.
HOTOIL
When this message is displayed there is an engine
over-temperature condition.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “GASCAP”
will display in the odometer. If this occurs, tighten the
fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset
button to turn off the “GASCAP” message. (Refer to
“Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in Section 7 of
this manual for more information). If the problem con-
tinues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. See your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
4
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in this section of the
manual.
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Single Trip Odometer
Press and release this button to change the display from
odometer to trip odometer. The word “Trip” displays to
show that the odometer is in Trip Mode. Press and release
the button again to change the display back to the
odometer.
To reset the trip odometer, first set the display to Trip
Mode. Then push and hold the button (approximately
2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles. The odom-
eter must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
Dual Trip Odometer — If Equipped
Press and release this button to change the display from
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
third time to change the display back to the odometer.
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the
display resets to 0 miles. The odometer must be in Trip
Mode to reset the trip odometer.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, however see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a
bulb check. This is normal. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
18. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
19. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the front fog lights are
ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4
21. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” should turn off with the engine running.
If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
23. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
axle control systems. The light will illuminate when the
key is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to
ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious
conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
24. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for approxi-
mately three seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
25. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
26. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system (if equipped).
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately three seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
27. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display—Premium Cluster Only
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro-
priate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in this section for more
information.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
•
System status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Personal settings (customer programmable features)
•
Compass heading display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
SW)
•
Outside temperature display (°F or °C)
•
Trip computer functions
•
Audio mode displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) displays (if
equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
4
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel
switch bank:
Press and release the MENU button to advance
the display to Trip Functions or Personal set-
tings or to return to the default System status
display.
Press and release the STEP button to advance
the display through the various Trip Functions
or Personal settings.
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading and the outside
temperature.
Press and release the RESET button to accept a
selection. The RESET button also resets various
Trip Functions.
EVIC Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after one mile traveled)
MENU
Button
STEP
Button
COM-
PASS
Button
RESET
Button
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not In PARK
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion
•
Left/Right Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph / 1 km h)
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Headlights On
•
Key In Ignition
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
perform the following procedure:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
4
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press and release the STEP button to advance the display
through the Trip Functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read,
RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will con-
tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET
button.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
•
Display Units In:
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until U.S. or METRIC appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently
displayed. Press and hold the RESET button once to clear
the function currently displayed.
To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
RESET button a second time within three seconds of
resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will
display during this three second window).
Compass Display
The compass heading indicates the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass heading and the outside temperature.
COM-
PASS
Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the ve-
hicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the STEP button until “Calibrate
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button and the “CAL”
indicator will quit flashing.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, completing one or more
circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the STEP button until “Compass
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
5. Press and release the STEP button to exit. Press the
STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu-
ally (Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration”).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
Press and release the STEP button to display the follow-
ing programmable features:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, or Francais depending on availability.
As you continue, the displayed information will be
shown in the selected language.
Auto Unlock on Exit
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press
and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is se-
lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the RESET button until “Driver
Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sound Horn with Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the flash lights ON,
LOCK/UNLOCK feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lights with Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until ON or OFF appears.
Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and hold the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
appears.
Headlights With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and hold the RESET button until ON or
OFF appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, press and hold the RESET button until
Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Illumination Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and hold the RESET button until OFF, 30, 60,
or 90 seconds appears.
Display Units in English or Metric
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until U.S. or METRIC
appears.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
REQ Radio
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO
(RER/REN) – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,
CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive
(HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in
(16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation
(RER) user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) — If Equipped
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Global Positioning System (GPS) — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ in-
cludes the following components for rear seat entertain-
ment:
•
A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
screen features brightness control for optimum day-
time and nighttime viewing.
Opening the Rear Seat VES™
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
•
The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
•
A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
VES™ Video Screen
VES™ Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
•
Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)™ Users Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left- and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a push-button in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering
wheel to access the switches.
Remote Sound Controls
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation with RES / REQ AM/FM Stereo Radio
with CD Player
Right-Hand Switch Functions
•
Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to select
AM, FM, Satellite (SAT) - if equipped, or CD (DISC)
mode.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
•
Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for CD Player
Operation
•
Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track on the CD.
•
Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
•
Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track on the CD, three times to listen to the
third track, and so forth.
•
Press the button located in the center of the control to
change CDs on the 6-Disc in-dash CD changer radio.
This button does not function for other radios.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
Operation with RER Multi-Media System
Right-Hand Switch Functions
•
Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to select
AM, FM, Satellite (SAT), Hard Drive (HD), or CD
(DISC) mode.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
•
Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to go to the
next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for CD Player
Operation
•
Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track on the CD.
•
Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
•
Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track on the CD, three times to listen to the
third track, and so forth.
•
Press the button located in the center of the control to
change CDs on the 6-Disc in-dash CD changer radio.
This button does not function for other radios.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
(HVAC)
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while the rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
temporarily put the system in recirculation
mode (ten minutes). This can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
After ten minutes, the system will return to normal mode
function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press in on this button to engage the
Air Conditioning. A light will illumi-
nate when the Air Conditioning Sys-
tem is engaged. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while the rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. To
accomplish this, the system gathers information from the
cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun-visors
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. Other sensors take account of ve-
hicle speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, air-
flow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
Automatic Temperature Control
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys-
tem will maintain that level automati-
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation turn the
knob to AUTO position. In manual
mode there are six blower speeds that
can be individual selected. In off posi-
tion the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After
ten minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO
mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation Button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
Button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then
turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode Knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation Button. This feature reduces
the possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for filter service intervals.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 267
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 267
▫ Tip Start Feature ..................... 268
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) ............................ 268
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................. 268
▫ After Starting ....................... 269
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ......... 269
䡵 Automatic Transaxle .................... 270
▫ Brake/Transaxle Interlock System ......... 271
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System ............................ 272
▫ 4–Speed/6–Speed Automatic Transaxle —
If Equipped......................... 273
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 276
▫ Operation .......................... 276
▫ General Information ................... 277
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 278
▫ Acceleration ........................ 278
5
▫ Traction ........................... 278
䡵 Driving Through Water .................. 279
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 279
▫ Shallow Standing Water ................ 279
䡵 Power Steering ........................ 281
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 282
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 282
䡵 Brake System ......................... 284
䡵 Anti—Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 286
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 289
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 289
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 289
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 290
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ......... 291
䡵 Tire Safety Information .................. 294
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 294
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN).......... 298
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ........... 299
䡵 Tires — General Information .............. 303
▫ Tire Pressure ........................ 303
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................. 304
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ...................... 306
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ........ 306
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped ......... 308
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 309
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 309
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Life Of Tire ......................... 310
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 311
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 312
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 312
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............ 313
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 314
▫ Base System ........................ 316
▫ Premium System — If Equipped .......... 318
▫ General Information ................... 322
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 323
▫ 2.4L And 2.7L Engine .................. 323
▫ 3.5L Engine ......................... 323
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................. 324
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 324
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 325
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 326
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 326
▫ Fuel System Cautions .................. 326
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............. 327
䡵 Flexible Fuel— 2.7L Only (Except California
Emission States) ....................... 328
▫ E-85 General Information ............... 328
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 329
▫ Fuel Requirements .................... 329
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 330
▫ Starting ........................... 330
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
5
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 331
▫ Replacement Parts .................... 331
▫ Maintenance ........................ 331
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 331
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............... 331
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message ............... 334
䡵 Vehicle Loading ....................... 334
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 334
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 335
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 335
▫ Overloading ........................ 335
▫ Loading ........................... 336
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 336
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 336
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 338
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ...................... 339
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 340
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 341
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 344
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 346
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ........................... 346
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
Make sure all occupants have securely fastened their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire which may cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Normal Starting
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine does not require pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
5
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-starting proce-
dures and follow them carefully.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grille and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
Shift Lever
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition,
the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children un-
attended inside a vehicle.
Brake/Transaxle Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always press the brake
pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of park. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transaxle interlock system. However, there is an
override system that allows you to shift out of PARK in
case of loss of power. To activate the override system:
•
Firmly apply the parking brake
•
Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position
•
Remove the cup holder liner
•
Insert a key, screwdriver, or finger into the front hole
then push and hold the manual override release lever
forward.
•
While holding the release lever forward, move the
shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL. Release the
override
NOTE: If this occurs, even if the override is successful,
it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake
pedal is applied.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
4–Speed/6–Speed Automatic Transaxle — If
Equipped
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles.
Gear Ranges
PARK
Supplement to the parking brake by locking the trans-
axle. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. Apply
parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as
this can damage the drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
REVERSE
Use this range for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into
this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Engine may be started in this range.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE — 6 Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick威
mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent
transaxle shifting occurs in the DRIVE range. For ex-
ample: When operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, (i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these
conditions, reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate
gear in AutoStick威 will improve the performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up.
DRIVE— 4 Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving, it provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the ⬙3⬙ range
when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, (i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling
into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers).
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Under these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve
performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build-up.
DRIVE 3— 4 Speed Transaxle
This range eliminates shifts into 4th gear. The transaxle
will operate normally in First and Second. Shifts into
Third may be delayed to provide second gear operation
at higher speeds. The ⬙3⬙ range should also be used when
descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis-
tress.
NOTE: Using the ⬙3⬙ range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build-up.
LOW — 4 Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac-
ceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
OVERDRIVE and “3” DRIVE range by changing
shift points. This is done to prevent transaxle damage
due to overheating.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transaxle
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle automatically shifts into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear (3rd gear with
a six speed automatic) despite the forward gear selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to
a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF, and then restart the engine.
4. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers six
manual ratio changes to provide you with more control.
AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
By placing the shift lever one shift-level below the DRIVE
position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows
the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.
Moving the shift lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift
and to the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will
display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range
indicator.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In Autostick威 mode, the transaxle will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the
Right (+) or Left (-).
AutoStick威 is deactivated when the shift lever is shifted
from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE
position.
General Information
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
•
If a ratio other than 1st is selected, and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is en-
gaged.
•
The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
•
Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
No chemical flushes should be used in any power
steering system; only the approved lubricant may be
used.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
upward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
handle downward to its stop, and then release the button
and the handle.
NOTE:
•
The parking brake will not release unless the handle is
pulled upward slightly past its applied position.
Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
•
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The
chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle
has returned to a stop.
The Brake System Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied
and the ignition switch is on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system operating.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
The Brake Warning Light monitors various brake func-
tions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system.
WARNING!
•
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot rest-
ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
wouldn’t have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
•
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dan-
gerous. A significant decrease in braking perfor-
mance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You
could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
ANTI—LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. See
your authorized Dealer Service Center.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
brake pedal pulsations,
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability
Program (ESP). All systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this Section of the
manual for more information about ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slip-
ping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differ-
ential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESP are in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this
Section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light, located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
WARNING! (Continued)
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP Operating Modes
All ESP equipped vehicles can choose the following ESP
operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situa-
tions. ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial ESP Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
Control Switch. When in Partial Off mode, the TCS
portion of ESP, except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
ESP/TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally, with the
exception of engine power reduction. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP
would normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP
Control Switch. This will restore the normal ESP On
mode of operation.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavail-
able.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP on again by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch.” This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com-
bined with the BAS indicator. The yellow ESP/
BAS Warning Light and the yellow ESP/TCS
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. They should both go out with the engine
running. If the ESP/BAS Warning Light comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in either the ESP or BAS system, or both. If
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
NOTE:
•
The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Warning
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure —
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Prolonged use of limited use spare, or an incorrect
tire size on either front wheel, may damage transaxle
differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
•
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either
your tire placard or limited use spare tire and
wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
•
Prolonged use of limited use spare, or incorrect
tire size of front wheel, may damage the transaxle
differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes approximately 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
•
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
•
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the
tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after
a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
•
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-
pressure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss through
the tire.
•
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
−
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68 F (20 C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20
F (-7 C) will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 23 psi (157 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale
Light will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC
will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic
display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L and 2.7L Engine
The 2.4L and 2.7L engines are designed to
meet all emission regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded “regu-
lar” gasolines having an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of
premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high
quality unleaded “regular” gasolines, and in some cir-
cumstances may result in poorer performance.
3.5L Engine
The 3.5L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane
range of 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of
89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions,
the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit
over high quality unleaded “regular” and “mid-grade”
gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in
poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-
lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with a 2.4L or 3.5L engine, DO
NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Etha-
nol. Use of these blends may result in starting and
driveability problems and may damage critical fuel
system components.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The 2.7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol
use (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES). Only
vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on
E-85. For more information, see “Flexible Fuel” in this
section.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
MMT in Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL— 2.7L ONLY (EXCEPT
CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. This section only covers those subjects that
are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other
sections of this manual for information on features that
are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only
powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the special E-85 fuel filler cap can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Along with the special E-85 fuel filler cap, your vehicle
may display a badge, which also indicates it can operate
on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM
D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may
experience hard starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations are followed,
especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F
(0°C).
Selection of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the manufacturer’s engines. Use MOPAR威 or an equiva-
lent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
NOTE: Your engine oil filler cap also describes the
correct engine oil to use.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your fuel economy and driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
Replacement Parts
All components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow
indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located on, is located in the
instrument cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door Fuel Filler Door Features
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system and could cause the
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and doing so will cause the malfunction
indicator light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in-
strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
the MIL light off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the
presence of a driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer and its cargo.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Engine/Transaxle Max. Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
1
2.4L/Auto See Note
2
1,000 lbs (450 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
2.7L/Auto See Note
2
1,500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
3.5L/Auto 22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m) 2,000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
1
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in Section 5 of this manual.
2
Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front
shields/guards are not recommended for use with all 4
cylinder and 2.7L engines with automatic transaxle.
Please refer to the following website, http://www-
5.chrysler.com/searchapp/ui.jsp or your authorized
dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or
cause severe engine damage under extreme condi-
tions.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in in-
creased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer
tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of
the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative
trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat
and potentially become disengaged from the tow
vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
age your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
WARNING!
•
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer tow-
ing as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transaxle, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
“Tires — General Information” in this section for
proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires — General
Information” in this section for information on tread
wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires — General Infor-
mation” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-
placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate
braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working
properly — including hazard flashers.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transaxle
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, third
gear for a four-speed automatic and the fifth gear for a
six-speed AutoStick威 should be selected.
NOTE: Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions,
will improve performance and extend transaxle life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This ac-
tion will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval speci-
fied for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing” in
the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transaxle fluid
level before towing. AutoStick威 six—speed transmission
is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked. See your
authorized dealership service center for assistance.
Electronic Speed Control — (If Equipped)
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating,
take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transaxle in
neutral and increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-
etrain will result.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 348
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 348
▫ Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only)
— If Equipped....................... 350
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 350
▫ Jack Location ....................... 351
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ................... 351
▫ Preparations For Jacking................ 351
▫ Jacking Instructions ................... 352
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedure ................. 358
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 361
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 362
▫ Towing With The Ignition Key ........... 362
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key ......... 363
▫
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
... 363
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly .................... 363
▫ Towing Without Power — Override
Transaxle Interlock System .............. 363
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flashers. When the Hazard
Warning flasher switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on
and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Press the switch a second
time to turn off flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service.
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and
the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
6
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) — If
Equipped
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil
temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of
53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your
vehicle speed further if needed.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transaxle)
or REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
6
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
6
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
3.
There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking
locations on each side of the body (as pictured above).
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts, until
each nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
The battery is stored between the left front headlight
assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. Access is
through the splash shield.
Jump-starting remote battery terminals are located under
the hood.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
•
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12-Volts.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without
allowing the vehicles to touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition
to LOCK for both vehicles.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote jump-
start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment.
Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive
battery post. Connect the other end of the same cable to
the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
Jump-Starting Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
6
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key威 Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
9. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump-
start positive battery post.
WARNING!
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above the freezing
point before attempting a jump-start.
NOTE: Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7
of this manual for information on accessing the battery
for service or replacement.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
•
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
(Continued)
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
•
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and FIRST gear. Usually the least accelerator
pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without
spinning the wheels is most effective.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system to Partial OFF before
attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Par-
tial Off Mode” under “Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP)” in Section 5 of this manual.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle and
tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck, and don’t let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
6
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Ignition Key
Front Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed (with all four wheels flat on
the ground), under the following conditions: The shift
lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be traveled
must not exceed 15 miles (25 km), and the towing speed
must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Exceeding these
towing limits may cause a transaxle failure. If the trans-
axle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more
than 15 miles (25 km), the vehicle must be transported
either with a flat bed truck or with the front wheels off
the ground.
CAUTION!
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC position.
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
axle may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains
in NEUTRAL.
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used. Rear towing is not recommended
with the front wheels on the ground, as transaxle damage
can result. If rear towing is the only alternative, a front
end dolly must be used. Proper towing equipment is
necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground of
vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, is
only permitted within the limitations described in this
section.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels
on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear
towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be
used. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Towing Without Power — Override Transaxle
Interlock System
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
6
Battery power is required to release the brake/transaxle
interlock system. There is an override system that allows
you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power. To
activate the override system:
•
Firmly apply the parking brake.
•
Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position.
•
Remove the cupholder liner.
•
Insert a key, screwdriver, or similar object into the
front hole then push and hold the manual override
release lever forward.
•
While holding the release lever forward, move the
shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL.
•
Release the override.
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............. 367
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.7L ............. 368
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L ............. 369
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ....... 370
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 370
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 371
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 372
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 373
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 373
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 373
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 377
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 377
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ............... 378
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 379
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............ 380
▫ Body Lubrication ..................... 381
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 382
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid .................. 382
▫ Exhaust System ...................... 383
▫ Cooling System ...................... 385
▫ Brake System ....................... 390
▫ Automatic Transaxle .................. 392
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 395
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders ...... 400
䡵 Fuses .............................. 400
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) .... 400
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 409
䡵 Replacement Bulbs ..................... 409
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 410
▫ Headlight .......................... 410
▫ Fog Lights ......................... 412
▫ Taillights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup
Lights ............................. 413
▫ License Plate Light ................... 415
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light ......... 415
䡵 Fluids And Capacities ................... 417
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 418
▫ Engine ............................ 418
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Integrated Power Module 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 — Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.7L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 10 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transaxle control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent per-
formance and fuel economy, as well as maintaining
engine emissions well within current government regu-
lations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist an authorized service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolv-
ing the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
7
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
7
The best time to check the engine oil level is about
5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range mark-
ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever occurs first.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
7
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
7
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion. Apply grease
to posts and clamps after tightening.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage as
battery damage can result.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
7
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.
Once disconnected, the dampener will retract under-
neath the instrument panel if you release it.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
A/C Air Filter Replacement
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
7
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
blade.
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade re-
placements fit multiple vehicles.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
7
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine, and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec-
tors disconnected for prolonged periods.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at anytime the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
7
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34 F
(⫺37 C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
7
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
4 Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and
warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the bottle.
6 Cylinder Engines — the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When addi-
tional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
7
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the proper maintenance intervals.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
7
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
•
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR威 DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Automatic Transaxle
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check — Vehicles with 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transaxle fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27° C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
•
Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering
the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid,
make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Fluid Level Check — Vehicles with 3.5L Engine
The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is
disassembled for any reason.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
7
•
Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
7
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean, then
MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR威
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials威 products.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
7
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift
upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
The TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the
air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component
may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the
graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
1
40 Amp
Green
—
Power Top
Module (If
Equipped)
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
2—
20 Amp Yel-
low
AWD Mod-
ule
3 — 10 Amp Red
Battery Feed
— Center
High
Mounted
Stop Light
(CHMSL)/
Brake
Switch
4 — 10 Amp Red
Battery Feed
— Ignition
Switch
5—
20 Amp Yel-
low
Trailer Tow
—If
Equipped
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
6 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
— Power
Mirror
Switch/
Climate
Controls
7—
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Sense 1
8—
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Sense 2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
9
40 Amp
Green
Battery Feed
— Power
Seats - if
equipped/
PZEV Air
Pump - if
equipped
10 —
20 Amp Yel-
low
Battery Feed
— Cabin
Compart-
ment Node
(CCN)
11 —
15 Amp Lt
Blue
Selectable
Power Out-
let
12 —
20 Amp Yel-
low
—
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
13 —
20 Amp Yel-
low
—
14 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
— Cabin
Compart-
ment Node
(CCN)/ In-
terior Light-
ing
15
40 Amp
Green
—
Battery Feed
— Radiator
Fan Relay
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
16 —
15 Amp Lt.
Blue
IGN Run/
ACC — Ci-
gar Lighter/
PWR
Sunroof
Mod
17 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
— Wireless
Control
Module
(WCM)/
Clock/
Steering
Control
Module
(SCM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
18
40 Amp
Green
—
Battery Feed
— Auto
Shutdown
(ASD) Relay
19 —
20 Amp Yel-
low
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
— Power
Amp Feed 2
-if
equipped
20 —
15 Amp Lt.
Blue
Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
— Radio
21 — 10 Amp Red —
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
22 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition
Run — Cli-
mate
Controls/
Hot Cup-
holder - if
equipped
23 —
15 Amp Lt.
Blue
Auto Shut-
down (ASD)
Relay Feed
3
24 —
25 Amp
Clear
Battery Feed
— PWR
Sunroof
Feed
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
25 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition
Run —
Heated Mir-
rors - If
Equipped
26 —
15 Amp Lt.
Blue
Auto Shut-
down (ASD)
Relay Feed
2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
27 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition
Run — Oc-
cupant Clas-
sification
Module
(OCM)/
Occupant
Restraint
Controller
(ORC)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
28 — 10 Amp Red
Ignition
Run — Oc-
cupant Clas-
sification
Module
(OCM)/
Occupant
Restraint
Controller
(ORC)
29 — —
Hot Car
(No Fuse
Required)
30 —
20 Amp Yel-
low
Ignition
Run —
Heated
Seats - If
Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
31 — 10 Amp Red —
32
30 Amp
Pink
—
Auto Shut-
down (ASD)
Relay Feed
1
33 — 10 Amp Red
Battery Feed
— Switch
Bank/
Diagnostic
Link
Connector/
Powertrain
Control
Module
(PCM)
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
34
30 Amp
Pink
—
Battery Feed
— Anti-
Lock Brakes
(ABS) Mod-
ule - if
equipped/
Electronic
Stability
Program
(ESP) Mod-
ule - If
Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
35
40 Amp
Green
—
Battery Feed
— Anti-
Lock Brakes
(ABS) Mod-
ule - If
Equipped/
Electronic
Stability
Program
(ESP) Mod-
ule - If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
Battery Feed
— Passen-
ger Door
Module
(PDM)/
Driver Door
Module
(DDM)
37 —
25 Amp
Clear
Power Top
Module (If
Equipped)
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Totally
Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days,
you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Front Courtesy/Reading Light ...........578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Light ..........578/W5W
Visor Vanity Light ......................A6220
Glove Box Light .......................A6220
Shift Indicator Light .................IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light .............579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight .....................9006
High Beam Headlight.....................9005
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Light . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Light......................9145/H10
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL)
Light ...........................W16W (921)
Rear Tail/Stop Light ....................3157K
Rear Turn Signal Light ....................3057
Backup Light...........................3157
License Light .....................168orW5W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
7
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
headlamp.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the totally integrated power
module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlight
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate bulb and connector
1
⁄
4
turn and pull outward
from assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise
1
⁄
4
turn to secure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
7
Fog Lights
1. Access to the lights through the lower fascia cutout is
limited.
2. Turn the steering wheel to allow access and remove
the inner fender shield.
3. Rotate bulb and connector
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull bulb off of connector and replace with a new one.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Taillights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights
The turn signal, brake and taillights and backup lights
are located in the rear corner body panel housing.
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
behind the taillight.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
7
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillight
housing.
3. Grasp the taillight and pull firmly outward pushing
gently on the studs from inside to disengage the light
housing.
4. Twist and remove socket from light.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Plate Light
1. Remove two retaining screws holding the light lens in
place.
2. Gently pry the light assembly loose.
3. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the light
assembly with the two retaining screws.
Center High-Mounted Stop Light
1. Open the trunk lid to find the centrally located high-
mounted stop light.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
7
2. Twist and remove socket from the back of the light
housing.
3. Replace the bulb and reinstall the socket into the
housing by locking it in place with a twist.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 2.7L Engine — (Except 2.4L PZEV) 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
3.5L Engine 17.2 Gallons 65 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.4 Liters
2.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.5L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
7.7 Quarts 7.3 Liters
2.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters
3.5L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology)
Engine Oil (2.4L and 2.7L
Engine)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma-
terial Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil (3.5L Engine)
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma-
terial Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Oil Filter (2.4L Engine) MOPAR威 Oil Filter (P/N 04884900AB) or equivalent.
Oil Filter (2.7L and 3.5L
Engines)
MOPAR威 Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*)
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.11 mm])
Spark Plugs (2.4L Engine
with PZEV)
ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs (2.7L Engine) TE10PMC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (3.5L Engine) ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection (2.4L and
2.7L Engines)
87 Octane
Fuel Selection (2.7L - EX-
CEPT CALIFORNIA EMIS-
SION STATES)
E-85 Ethanol
Fuel Selection (3.5L Engine) 89 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transaxle MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not avail-
able, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
7
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this sched-
uled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use Factory
Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or under
“Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster
Descriptions section of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine except PZEV*).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*).
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV valve, if
necessary†.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV*,
2.7L and 3.5L Engines).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant.
❏ Inspect accessory drive belt, replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine except PZEV*).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 441
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............ 441
▫ Prepare A List ....................... 441
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 441
䡵 If You Need Assistance .................. 441
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center ........... 442
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 442
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 442
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 443
▫ Service Contract ..................... 443
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 444
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 444
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 444
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 444
▫ In Canada .......................... 445
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441
9
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443
9
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445
9
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447
9
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .......................282
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ..............286
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........387
Adding Fuel ...........................331
Adding Washer Fluid .....................382
Additives, Fuel .........................326
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 377
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............379
Air Conditioning ........................250
Air Conditioning Controls .................250
Air Conditioning Filter .................261,380
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............262
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............379,380
Air Conditioning System .............250,254,379
Air Pressure, Tires .......................304
Airbag ..............................52,61
Airbag Deployment .......................63
Airbag Light ...................53,60,66,81,178
Airbag Maintenance .......................65
Airbag, Side ........................55,60,61
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........56,60,61
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............19,178
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................240
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........386,387,417
Disposal ............................388
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............286
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................286
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........19
Appearance Care ........................395
Ashtray ...............................159
Assistance Towing .......................105
Auto Down Power Windows ................36
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................33
Auto Up Power Windows ................37,155
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................88
Automatic Door Locks ...................32,33
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ........181,191,422
450 INDEX
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........254
Automatic Transaxle .................13,270,392
Adding Fluid ...................393,394,419
Filter ...............................394
Fluid and Filter Changes .................394
Fluid Level Check ...................393,394
Interlock System .......................272
Reset Mode ..........................275
Selection Of Lubricant ...................419
Shifting .............................273
Special Additives ......................394
Autostick .............................276
Battery ...............................378
Gas Caution ..........................378
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......26
Location ............................378
Beverage Cooler ........................168
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............381
B-Pillar Location ........................299
Brake Assist System ......................290
Brake, Parking ..........................282
Brake System ........................284,390
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................286
Fluid Check .......................391,419
Master Cylinder .......................391
Parking .............................282
Warning Light ........................187
Brakes .............................284,390
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............271
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........79
Bulb Replacement .....................409,410
Bulbs, Light ............................409
Calibration, Compass .....................194
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........21
Capacities, Fluid ........................417
INDEX 451
10
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................331
Oil (Engine) ..................367,368,369,375
Power Steering ........................282
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............388
Car Washes ............................395
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................327
Cargo Area Features ......................162
Cargo Compartment ......................162
Cargo Load Floor ........................162
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................162
Caution, Exhaust Gas ......................80
Cellular Phone ........................91,249
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............415
Chains, Tire ............................312
Changing A Flat Tire .....................350
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................296
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ................................371
Child Restraint ....................68,70,74,77
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............72,74
Child Safety Locks ........................34
Cigar Lighter ...........................159
Clean Air Gasoline .......................324
Cleaning
Wheels .............................397
Windshield Wiper Blades .................382
Climate Control .........................250
Clock ........................200,214,218,228
Coin Holder ...........................164
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............249
Compact Spare Tire ......................306
Compass ..............................193
Compass Calibration .....................194
Compass Variance .......................194
Computer, Trip/Travel ..................21,192
Console ............................132,164
Console, Floor .......................132,164
452 INDEX
Contract, Service ........................443
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........388
Cooler, Beverage ........................168
Cooling System .........................385
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............387
Coolant Capacity ......................417
Coolant Level ......................385,389
Disposal of Used Coolant ................388
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................386
Inspection ...........................389
Points to Remember ....................389
Pressure Cap .........................388
Radiator Cap .........................388
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......386,417,418
Corrosion Protection .....................395
Crankcase Ventilation Module ...............21
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............144
Cruise Light ...........................182
Cupholders ......................132,160,400
Customer Assistance .....................441
Customer Programmable Features ............196
Data Recorder, Event ......................66
Dealer Service ..........................373
Defroster, Rear Window ...................167
Defroster, Windshield ................81,252,258
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................141
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................370
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................139
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle .................393,394
Oil (Engine) ..........................373
Power Steering ........................282
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................362
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............388
Engine Oil ...........................376
Door Locks .............................31
INDEX 453
10
Door Locks, Automatic ....................32
Door Opener, Garage .....................147
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ....................278
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................279
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) ....244
E-85 Fuel .............................328
Electric Rear Window Defrost ...............167
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................89
Electrical Power Outlets ...................156
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......144
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............291
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....189
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking .............................350
Jump Starting .........................358
Towing .............................362
Emergency Trunk Release .................39,40
Emission Control System Maintenance ......371,422
Engine ..........................367,368,369
Air Cleaner ..........................377
Block Heater .........................269
Break-In Recommendations ................79
Checking Oil Level .....................373
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................385,418
Cooling .............................385
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................327
Fuel Requirements ..................323,417
Jump Starting .........................358
Oil ...........................373,417,418
Oil Change Interval ............181,191,374,422
Oil Filler Cap .................367,368,369,375
Oil Filter ............................377
Oil Filter Disposal ......................376
Oil Selection .......................375,417
Oil Synthetic .........................376
454 INDEX
Overheating ..........................348
Temperature Gauge .....................177
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................375
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........63
Entry System, Illuminated ..................21
Ethanol ...............................324
Event Data Recorder ......................66
Exhaust Gas Caution ................80,327,383
Exhaust System .........................383
Extender, Seat Belt ........................51
Fabric Care .........................397,398
Filler Location Fuel ....................177,331
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................377
Air Conditioning ....................261,380
Automatic Transaxle ....................394
Engine Oil ........................377,418
Engine Oil Disposal ....................376
Flashers ..............................348
Hazard Warning .......................348
Turn Signal ..........................413
Flash-To-Pass ...........................137
Flat Tire Stowage ........................357
Flexible Fuel Vehicles .....................328
Cruising Range ........................331
Engine Oil ...........................330
Fuel Requirements ..................328,329
Maintenance .......................328,331
Replacement Parts .....................331
Starting .............................330
Flooded Engine Starting ...................268
Floor Console ..........................164
Fluid Capacities .........................417
Fluid Leaks .............................81
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle .................393,394
Brake ............................391,419
INDEX 455
10
Cooling System .......................385
Engine Oil ...........................373
Power Steering .....................282,419
Fluids ................................418
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........418
Fog Lights .......................137,183,412
Folding Rear Seat .....................131,132
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................361
Fuel .................................323
Adding .............................331
Additives ............................326
Clean Air ............................324
Ethanol .............................324
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................177,331
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ...................177
Gasoline ............................323
Gauge ..............................177
Light ...............................178
Materials Added .......................326
Methanol ............................324
Octane Rating ......................323,418
Requirements ......................323,417
Tank Capacity ........................417
Fuel, Flexible .............See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution .....................333
Fueling ...............................331
Fuses ................................400
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........147
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............331,334,370
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................324
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................323
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................324
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................177
Fuel ................................177
Odometer ...........................180
Tachometer ..........................179
456 INDEX
Gearshift ..............................273
General Information .................18,119,322
General Maintenance .....................373
Glass Cleaning ..........................399
Glove Compartment ......................168
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............335,337
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............335,337
GVWR ...............................335
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect威) ..............91
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................279
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................348
Head Restraints .........................130
Headlights ............................410
Bulb Replacement ......................410
Cleaning ............................397
High Beam ........................139,187
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........139
On With Wipers .......................142
Passing .............................137
Switch ..............................135
Heated Seats ...........................128
Heater ...............................250
Heater, Engine Block .....................269
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................338
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 147
Hood Prop ............................133
Hood Release ..........................132
Ignition ...............................13
Key ...............................12,13
Ignition Key Removal .....................13
Illuminated Entry ........................21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................15
Infant Restraint ......................68,69,70
INDEX 457
10
Information Center, Vehicle .................189
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................87
Instrument Cluster ....................175,177
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............174
Instrument Panel Cover ...................397
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............399
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............400
Interior Appearance Care ..................397
Interior Lights ..........................134
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........141
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ...........................351
Jack Operation .......................350,352
Jacking Instructions ......................352
Jump Starting ..........................358
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................21
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ..........................52,53
Lane Change and Turn Signals ...........183,413
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................43
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) ..............................74
Latches
Hood ...............................132
Lead Free Gasoline ......................323
Life of Tires ............................310
Light Bulbs ............................409
Lights ..............................81,134
Airbag ........................53,66,81,178
Back-Up .............................413
458 INDEX
Brake Warning ........................187
Bulb Replacement ......................410
Center Mounted Stop ...................415
Daytime Running ......................137
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 291
Engine Temperature Warning ..............179
Fog ..........................137,183,412
Headlight Switch ......................135
Headlights ...........................135
Headlights On With Wipers ...............142
High Beam Indicator ....................187
Illuminated Entry .......................21
Instrument Cluster .....................135
Interior .............................134
License .............................415
Lights On Reminder ....................137
Low Fuel ............................178
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........186
Map Reading .........................134
Oil Pressure ..........................179
Passing .............................137
Seat Belt Reminder .....................179
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..............19
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..............178
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........184,314
Traction Control .......................291
Turn Signal .....................138,183,413
Voltage .............................178
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....177
Loading Vehicle ......................334,336
Capacities ...........................336
Tires ...............................299
Locks
Auto Unlock ..........................33
Child Protection ........................34
Door ................................31
Power Door ...........................32
Low Tire Pressure System ..................314
INDEX 459
10
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ..............................74
Lubrication, Body .......................381
Lumbar Support ........................127
Maintenance Free Battery ..................378
Maintenance, General .....................373
Maintenance Procedures ...................373
Maintenance Schedule ....................422
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 186,371
Manual, Service .........................445
Map/Reading Lights .....................134
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................391
Methanol .............................324
Mini-Trip Computer ......................192
Mirrors ................................87
Automatic Dimming .....................88
Electric Powered .......................89
Outside ..............................90
Rearview .............................87
Vanity ...............................90
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............314
Mopar Parts .........................372,444
MTBE/ETBE ...........................324
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................79
Occupant Restraints .....................60,63
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .........41,55,56,60,61
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............323
Odometer .............................180
Trip .............................180,182
Oil Change Indicator ................181,191,422
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............181,191
Oil, Engine .........................373,418
Capacity ............................417
Change Interval ...............181,191,374,422
460 INDEX
Checking ............................373
Dipstick .............................373
Disposal ............................376
Filter ............................377,418
Filter Disposal ........................376
Identification Logo .....................375
Materials Added to .....................376
Recommendation ...................375,417
Synthetic ............................376
Viscosity ..........................375,417
Oil Filter, Change ........................377
Oil Filter, Selection .......................377
Oil Pressure Light .......................179
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............370,371
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........147
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overdrive .............................274
Overheating, Engine ......................348
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,445
Paint Care .............................395
Panic Alarm ............................26
Parking Brake ..........................282
Parking On Hill .........................283
Passing Light ...........................137
Personal Settings ........................196
Pets ..................................79
Phone, Cellular ..........................91
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect威) ..............91
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........299
Power
Door Locks ...........................32
Mirrors ..............................89
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........156
Seats ...............................127
Steering ..........................281,282
Sunroof .............................153
Windows .............................35
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............51
INDEX 461
10
Preparation for Jacking ....................351
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................49
Programmable Electronic Features ............196
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................26
Radial Ply Tires .........................306
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........388
Radio Operation ........................249
Radio Remote Controls ....................246
Radio, Satellite ..........................238
Rear Cupholder .........................161
Rear Seat, Folding ....................131,132
Rear Window Defroster ...................167
Rear Window Features ....................167
Rearview Mirrors ........................87
Recorder, Event Data ......................66
Recreational Towing ......................346
Reformulated Gasoline ....................324
Refrigerant ............................380
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................49,50
Remote Control
Door Locks ...........................21
Security Alarm .........................19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ...............21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........246
Remote Starting System ....................28
Remote Trunk Release .....................39
Replacement Bulbs .......................409
Replacement Keys ........................17
Replacement Parts .......................372
Replacement Tires .......................311
Reporting Safety Defects ...................444
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........181,191
Restraint, Head .........................130
Restraints, Child .........................68
462 INDEX
Restraints, Infant .........................69
Rotation, Tires ..........................313
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................80
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............81
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................444
Safety Information, Tire ...................294
Safety Tips .............................80
Satellite Radio ..........................238
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................240
Schedule, Maintenance ....................422
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................399
Seat Belt Reminder .....................49,50
Seat Belts
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........48
And Pregnant Women ...................51
Child Restraint .......................68,77
Extender .............................51
Front Seat ..........................43,44
Operating Instructions ...................44
Pretensioners ..........................49
Rear Seat .............................43
Reminder ............................179
Untwisting Procedure ....................48
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................41
Seats .................................124
Adjustment ..........................124
Cleaning .........................132,398
Head Restraints .......................130
Heated .............................128
Lumbar Support .......................127
Power ..............................127
Rear Folding .......................131,132
Rear Folding (Sedan) ....................162
Reclining ............................126
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........386,418
INDEX 463
10
Selection of Oil .........................375
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................15
Sentry Key Programming ...................17
Service Assistance .......................441
Service Contract .........................443
Service Manuals ........................445
Setting the Clock ................200,214,218,228
Settings, Personal ........................196
Shoulder Belts ...........................43
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..........261
Signals, Turn ...........................413
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............278
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................312
Snow Tires ............................312
Spare Tire .......................306,308,351
Specifications
Oil ................................375
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........144,182
Speedometer ...........................177
Speedometer and Odometer ................175
Starting ...............................267
Engine Fails to Start ....................268
Starting Procedures ......................267
Steering
Power ...........................281,282
Tilt Column ..........................143
Wheel, Tilt ...........................143
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................246
Storage ............................162,409
Storage, Vehicle .........................260
Stuck, Freeing ..........................361
Sun Roof ..............................153
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........52
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................376
Tachometer ............................179
Taillights ..............................413
464 INDEX
Telescoping Steering Column ...............143
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........254
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......177,349
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............72
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................19
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Tilt Steering Column .....................143
Time Delay, Headlight ....................136
Tip Start ..............................268
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........299
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............298
Tire Markings ..........................294
Tire Safety Information ....................294
Tires ............................81,303,447
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................310
Air Pressure ..........................303
Chains ..............................312
Changing ............................350
Compact Spare ........................306
Flat Changing ........................357
General Information ....................303
High Speed ..........................306
Inflation Pressures .....................304
Jacking .............................350
Life of Tires ..........................310
Load Capacity ........................299
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........314
Pressure Warning Light ..................184
Quality Grading .......................447
Radial ..............................306
Replacement ..........................311
Rotation .............................313
Safety ...........................294,303
Sizes ...............................296
Snow Tires ...........................312
Spare Tire ...........................351
Spinning ............................309
Tread Wear Indicators ...................309
INDEX 465
10
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............340
Towing ...............................336
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............105
Disabled Vehicle .......................362
Guide ..............................339
Recreational ..........................346
Weight ..............................339
Towing Assistance .......................105
Trailer Towing ..........................336
Cooling System Tips ....................346
Hitches .............................338
Minimum Requirements .................341
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................340
Trailer Towing Guide .....................339
Trailer Weight ..........................339
Transaxle .............................270
Additives ............................394
Automatic ......................13,270,392
Autostick ............................276
Filter ...............................394
Maintenance ..........................392
Operation ...........................270
Overdrive ...........................274
Selection of Lubricant ...................419
Transmission
Range Indicator .......................179
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 147
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................26
Transporting Pets ........................79
Tread Wear Indicators ....................309
Trip Odometer ..........................180
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................182
Trunk Release, Emergency ................39,40
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............39
Turn Signals ......................138,183,413
466 INDEX
UConnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) ..............91
Understanding Your Instrument Panel .........174
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................447
Universal Transmitter .....................147
Unleaded Gasoline .......................323
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............48
Upholstery Care ........................397
Vanity Mirrors ...........................90
Variance, Compass .......................194
Vehicle Certification Label .................334
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................299,334,336
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .......................260,409
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................244
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................375
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............119
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) ...........................177
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................444
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................382
Washers, Windshield ................140,142,382
Washing Vehicle .........................395
Water
Driving Through ......................279
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................397
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................397
Wind Buffeting .......................38,155
Window Fogging ........................261
Windows ..............................35
Power ...............................35
Windshield Defroster ..................252,258
INDEX 467
10
Windshield Washers ...................140,142
Fluid ...............................382
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................382
Windshield Wipers .......................140
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................382
Wipers, Intermittent ......................141
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure ......398
468 INDEX
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUALWARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TOKNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key RemovalKey-In-Ignition ReminderLocking Doors With The KeySENTRY KEY Replacement KeysSentry Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Rearming The SystemTo Arm The SystemTo Disarm The
SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) - IF EQUIPPED To Unlock the DoorsTo Lock the DoorsTo Unlatch the TrunkUsing the Express Down Windows Feature - If EquippedUsing the Panic AlarmProgramming Additional
RKE TransmittersBattery ReplacementGeneral InformationREMOTE START SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED How to Use Remote StartDOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksChild Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)POWER WINDOWS Power Window
SwitchesAuto Window Down -If EquippedAuto Window Up - If EquippedResetAuto UpWindow Lockout SwitchWindBuffetingTRUNK RELEASE TRUNK SAFETYWARNING Trunk Internal Emergency ReleaseOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsAdjustable Upper
Shoulder Belt AnchorageRear Seat BeltsSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) BeltAlert ProgrammingAutomatic Locking ModeSeat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) - AirbagAirbag
System ComponentsFront Seat Airbag FeaturesAirbagDeployment Sensors and ControlsEvent Data Recorder (EDR)Child RestraintsENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS SAFETYTIPS Exhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside the VehiclePeriodic Safety
Checks YouShould Make Outside the VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror - If EquippedAutomatic Dimming Mirror - If EquippedPower MirrorsAdjusting Side View MirrorsIlluminated Vanity Mirrors - If Equipped
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationVOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) - IF
EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System (VR) OperationCommandsVoice TrainingSEATS Manual Front Seat AdjustmentsPower Seats - If EquippedHeated Seats - If EquippedFold-Flat Front Passenger SeatAdjustable Head RestraintsFolding Rear SeatFolding Rear Seat
Center ArmrestTO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Map/Reading/Interior LightsHeadlights, Parking Lights and Instrument Panel LightsAutomatic Headlight System - If EquippedHeadlight Time DelayFlash-To-PassDaytime Running Lights (DRL) - If EquippedLights
On ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedTurn SignalsHigh Beam/Low Beam Select SwitchWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper SystemMist FeatureHeadlights With Wipers Feature (Available With Auto Headlights Only)Windshield Washers
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED To ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary The Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED
Programming HomelinkGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationPOWERSUNROOF - IF EQUIPPED SunroofOperationAuto Sunroof Express WithAnti-Pinch Protection - If EquippedSunshade OperationWind BuffetingSunroof
MaintenanceIgnition Off OperationELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER - IF EQUIPPED CUPHOLDERS Heated or Cooled Cupholder - If EquippedRear Bottle HoldersSTORAGE Drivers Side Sunglass Holder - If EquippedCargo Area
CONSOLE FEATURES Dual Storage BinsVideo Console - If EquippedREAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster - If EquippedBEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE BIN - IF EQUIPPED UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL
FEATURES INSTRUMENTCLUSTER - BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - PREMIUMINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ELECTRONICVEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - IF EQUIPPEDEVIC DisplaysOil Change RequiredTrip FunctionsCompass Display
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)SALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play,
DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO (RER/REN) - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Voice Recognition System (VR)
- If EquippedOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) - If EquippedClock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE
For CD And MP3 Audio PlayNotes on Playing MP3 FilesOperation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeSALES CODE RES/RSC - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD
MODE for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)SATELLITE RADIO - IF EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY) System ActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID)Selecting Satellite ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - Satellite ModeOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES) (If Equipped)VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) - IF EQUIPPED REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED Operation with RES / REQ AM/FM Stereo Radio with CD PlayerOperation with RER Multi-Media SystemCD/DVD MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND
CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - If Equipped Operating TipsSTARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Normal StartingTip Start FeatureExtremely
Cold Weather (Below -20 degrees F or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails to StartAfter StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER - IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Brake/Transaxle Interlock SystemAutomatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System4-Speed/6-Speed Automatic
Transaxle - If EquippedAUTOSTICK - IF EQUIPPED OperationGeneral InformationDRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES AccelerationTractionDRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising WaterShallow Standing WaterPOWER STEERING Power Steering Fluid Check
PARKING BRAKEBRAKE SYSTEM ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) ELECTRONICBRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Traction Control System(TCS)Brake Assist System (BAS)Electronic Stability Program (ESP)TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If EquippedLimited Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife
of TireReplacement TiresTIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) Base SystemPremium System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS 2.4L and 2.7L Engine3.5L Engine
Reformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsE-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesMMT in GasolineMaterials Added to FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsFLEXIBLE FUEL- 2.7L ONLY (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES) E-85 General
InformationETHANOL FUEL (E-85)Fuel RequirementsSelection of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) and Gasoline VehiclesStartingCruising RangeReplacement PartsMaintenanceADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)Loose Filler Cap MessageVEHICLE
LOADING Vehicle Certification LabelGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)OverloadingLoadingTRAILER TOWING Common Towing DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and
Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF
YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS Engine Oil Overheating (2.4LEngine Only) - If EquippedJACKINGAND TIRE CHANGING Jack LocationSpareTire StowagePreparations ForJackingJacking InstructionsJUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE FREEINGA STUCK VEHICLE TOWING
A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing With The Ignition KeyTowing Without The Ignition KeyTowingThis Vehicle BehindAnother VehicleTowing ThisVehicle BehindAnother Vehicle WithA Tow DollyTowing Without Power - Override Transaxle Interlock SystemMAINTAINING YOUR
VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 2.4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 2.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 3.5L ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENT
PARTS DEALERSERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine OilFilterEngine Air Cleaner FilterMaintenance-Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenanceA/C Air Filter - If EquippedBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesAddingWasher FluidExhaust System
Cooling SystemBrake SystemAutomatic TransaxleAppearance Care And Protection From CorrosionCleaning Center Console CupholdersFUSES Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT HeadlightFog
LightsTaillights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup LightsLicense Plate LightCenter High-Mounted Stop LightFLUIDSAND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS EngineMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED
ASSISTANCE Chrysler LLC Customer CenterChrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterIn Mexico contactCustomer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)Service ContractWARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING
SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.CIn CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2009 AVENGER SEDAN
AVENGER
SEDAN
Chrysler LLC
81-226-0930
First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2009
